blob: 29c7be8808d52b21e0c41949ce62d816d8b58372 [file] [log] [blame]
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001/*
Johannes Berg3017b802007-08-28 17:01:53 -04002 * mac80211 <-> driver interface
3 *
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
5 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +02006 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
Johannes Bergd98ad832014-09-03 15:24:57 +03007 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07008 *
9 * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
10 * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 as
11 * published by the Free Software Foundation.
12 */
13
14#ifndef MAC80211_H
15#define MAC80211_H
16
Paul Gortmaker187f1882011-11-23 20:12:59 -050017#include <linux/bug.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070018#include <linux/kernel.h>
19#include <linux/if_ether.h>
20#include <linux/skbuff.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070021#include <linux/ieee80211.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070022#include <net/cfg80211.h>
Johannes Berg42d987952011-07-07 18:58:01 +020023#include <asm/unaligned.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070024
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040025/**
26 * DOC: Introduction
27 *
28 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
29 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
30 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
31 * drivers.
32 */
33
34/**
35 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
36 *
37 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070038 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
39 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
40 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +010041 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
42 * tasklet function.
43 *
44 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -070045 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070046 */
47
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040048/**
49 * DOC: Warning
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070050 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040051 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
52 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
53 */
54
55/**
56 * DOC: Frame format
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070057 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040058 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
59 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
60 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
61 * hardware.
62 *
63 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
64 *
65 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
66 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
67 *
68 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
69 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070070 */
71
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +020072/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -040073 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
74 *
75 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
76 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
77 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
78 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
79 *
80 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
81 * suspend.
82 *
83 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
84 *
85 */
86
Paul Gortmaker313162d2012-01-30 11:46:54 -050087struct device;
88
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -040089/**
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +020090 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
91 *
92 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +010093 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +020094 */
95enum ieee80211_max_queues {
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +020096 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16,
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +010097 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +020098};
99
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200100#define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff
101
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200102/**
Johannes Berg4bce22b2010-11-16 11:49:58 -0800103 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
104 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
105 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
106 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
107 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
108 */
109enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
110 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0,
111 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1,
112 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2,
113 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3,
114};
Johannes Berg948d8872011-09-29 16:04:29 +0200115#define IEEE80211_NUM_ACS 4
Johannes Berg4bce22b2010-11-16 11:49:58 -0800116
117/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400118 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
119 *
120 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100121 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400122 *
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -0400123 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200124 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
125 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400126 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100127 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300128 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +0200129 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400130 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700131struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200132 u16 txop;
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100133 u16 cw_min;
134 u16 cw_max;
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200135 u8 aifs;
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300136 bool acm;
Kalle Valoab133152010-01-12 10:42:31 +0200137 bool uapsd;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700138};
139
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700140struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
141 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
142 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
143 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
144 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
145};
146
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100147/**
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200148 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100149 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200150 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100151 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200152 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
153 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200154 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200155 */
156enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100157 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0),
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200158 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1),
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100159 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2),
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200160 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3),
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200161 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH = BIT(4),
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200162};
163
164/**
165 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
166 *
167 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
168 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
169 *
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100170 * @def: the channel definition
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200171 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200172 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
173 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
174 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
175 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
Simon Wunderlich5d7fad42012-11-30 19:17:28 +0100176 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100177 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200178 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
179 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
180 */
181struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100182 struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200183 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200184
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200185 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
186
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100187 bool radar_enabled;
188
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +0100189 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200190};
191
192/**
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +0300193 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
194 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
195 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
196 * needs to be switched from one to the other.
197 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
198 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
199 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
200 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
201 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
202 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
203 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
204 * for changes/removal.)
205 */
206enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
207 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
208 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
209};
210
211/**
212 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
213 *
214 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
215 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The
216 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
217 * done.
218 *
219 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
220 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
221 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
222 */
223struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
224 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
225 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
226 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
227};
228
229/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100230 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
231 *
232 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
233 * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
234 *
235 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
236 * also implies a change in the AID.
237 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
238 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300239 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
Tomas Winkler38668c02008-03-28 16:33:32 -0700240 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200241 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200242 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200243 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
244 * reason (IBSS and managed mode)
245 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
246 * new beacon (beaconing modes)
247 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
248 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200249 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200250 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300251 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200252 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
253 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200254 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200255 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200256 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300257 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200258 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100259 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
260 * changed (currently only in P2P client mode, GO mode will be later)
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300261 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
262 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100263 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
264 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
265 * context had been assigned.
Rostislav Lisovy239281f2014-11-03 10:33:19 +0100266 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100267 */
268enum ieee80211_bss_change {
269 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0,
270 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1,
271 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2,
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300272 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3,
Alexander Simona7ce1c92011-09-18 00:16:45 +0200273 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4,
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200274 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5,
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200275 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6,
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200276 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7,
277 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8,
278 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9,
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200279 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10,
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200280 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11,
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300281 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12,
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200282 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13,
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200283 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14,
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300284 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15,
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200285 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16,
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300286 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17,
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200287 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18,
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100288 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19,
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300289 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20,
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100290 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21,
Rostislav Lisovy239281f2014-11-03 10:33:19 +0100291 BSS_CHANGED_OCB = 1<<22,
Johannes Bergac8dd502010-05-05 09:44:02 +0200292
293 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100294};
295
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300296/*
297 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
298 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
299 * filtering will be disabled.
300 */
301#define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
302
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100303/**
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -0700304 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event - RSSI threshold event
305 * An indicator for when RSSI goes below/above a certain threshold.
306 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi crossed the high threshold set by the driver.
307 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi crossed the low threshold set by the driver.
308 */
309enum ieee80211_rssi_event {
310 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
311 RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
312};
313
314/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100315 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
316 *
317 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
318 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
319 *
320 * @assoc: association status
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200321 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
322 * or not
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530323 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100324 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
325 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
Johannes Berg7a5158e2008-10-08 10:59:33 +0200326 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble;
327 * if the hardware cannot handle this it must set the
328 * IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_PREAMBLE_INCAPABLE hardware flag
329 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP);
330 * if the hardware cannot handle this it must set the
331 * IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_SLOT_INCAPABLE hardware flag
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +0100332 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +0200333 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300334 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200335 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100336 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
337 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
338 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
339 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
340 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.)
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200341 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
342 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100343 * (see @sync_tsf)
344 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
345 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700346 * @beacon_int: beacon interval
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800347 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200348 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
349 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in
350 * the current band.
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300351 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
Felix Fietkaudd5b4cc2010-11-22 20:58:24 +0100352 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200353 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
354 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100355 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
356 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
Johannes Berg074d46d2012-03-15 19:45:16 +0100357 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
Johannes Berg9ed6bcc2009-05-08 20:47:39 +0200358 * This field is only valid when the channel type is one of the HT types.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200359 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
360 * implies disabled
361 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300362 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
363 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
364 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
365 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100366 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
367 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
368 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200369 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200370 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
371 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
372 * your driver/device needs to do.
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300373 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
374 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200375 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300376 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
377 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200378 * @txpower: TX power in dBm
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100379 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100380 */
381struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200382 const u8 *bssid;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100383 /* association related data */
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200384 bool assoc, ibss_joined;
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530385 bool ibss_creator;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100386 u16 aid;
387 /* erp related data */
388 bool use_cts_prot;
389 bool use_short_preamble;
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300390 bool use_short_slot;
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200391 bool enable_beacon;
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800392 u8 dtim_period;
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700393 u16 beacon_int;
394 u16 assoc_capability;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200395 u64 sync_tsf;
396 u32 sync_device_ts;
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100397 u8 sync_dtim_count;
Johannes Berg881d9482009-01-21 15:13:48 +0100398 u32 basic_rates;
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300399 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
Felix Fietkaudd5b4cc2010-11-22 20:58:24 +0100400 int mcast_rate[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
Johannes Berg9ed6bcc2009-05-08 20:47:39 +0200401 u16 ht_operation_mode;
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200402 s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
403 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100404 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300405 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100406 int arp_addr_cnt;
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200407 bool qos;
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200408 bool idle;
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300409 bool ps;
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300410 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
411 size_t ssid_len;
412 bool hidden_ssid;
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200413 int txpower;
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100414 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100415};
416
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800417/**
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200418 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800419 *
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700420 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800421 *
Johannes Berg7351c6b2009-11-19 01:08:30 +0100422 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200423 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
424 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
425 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the
426 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
427 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
428 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
429 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
430 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
431 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
432 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
433 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200434 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200435 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
436 * station
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200437 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200438 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
439 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200440 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200441 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
Johannes Bergab5b5342009-08-07 16:28:09 +0200442 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
443 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
444 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
445 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
446 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
447 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
448 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
449 * hardware queue.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200450 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
451 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
452 * is for the whole aggregation.
Ron Rindjunsky429a3802008-07-01 14:16:03 +0300453 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
454 * so consider using block ack request (BAR).
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200455 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
456 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
457 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600458 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
459 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
460 * off-channel operation.
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100461 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
462 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
463 * it can be sent out.
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200464 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
465 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200466 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
467 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100468 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
469 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
470 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200471 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
472 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
473 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
474 * queue gets full.
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100475 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
476 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
477 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100478 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
479 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
480 * should kick the MLME state machine.
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200481 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
482 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
483 * status to user space)
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400484 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200485 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
486 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
Johannes Berg610dbc92011-01-06 22:36:44 +0100487 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
488 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
489 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
490 * handled properly by the device.
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200491 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
492 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
493 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530494 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
495 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
496 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200497 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
498 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
499 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
Johannes Bergdeeaee192011-09-29 16:04:35 +0200500 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
501 * PS-Poll responses.
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530502 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
503 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
504 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200505 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
506 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
507 * monitor injection).
Felix Fietkaud6d23de2013-06-04 12:15:42 +0200508 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
509 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200510 *
511 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
512 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800513 */
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200514enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200515 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200516 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1),
517 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2),
518 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3),
519 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4),
520 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5),
521 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6),
522 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7),
523 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8),
524 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9),
525 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10),
526 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11),
527 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12),
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600528 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13),
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100529 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(14),
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200530 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15),
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200531 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16),
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100532 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17),
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200533 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18),
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100534 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19),
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100535 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20),
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200536 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21),
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400537 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22),
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200538 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24),
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +0100539 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25),
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200540 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26),
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530541 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27),
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200542 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28),
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530543 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29),
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200544 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30),
Felix Fietkaud6d23de2013-06-04 12:15:42 +0200545 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(31),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200546};
547
Johannes Bergabe37c42010-06-07 11:12:27 +0200548#define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23
549
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200550/**
551 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
552 *
553 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
554 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
555 *
556 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
557 */
558enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
559 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0),
560};
561
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200562/*
563 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
564 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
565 */
566#define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \
567 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \
568 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \
569 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \
570 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100571 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200572 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200573 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200574
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530575/**
576 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
577 * Rate Control algorithm.
578 *
579 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
580 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
581 *
582 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
583 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
584 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
585 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
586 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100587 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
588 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530589 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
590 * Greenfield mode.
591 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100592 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
593 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
594 * (80+80 isn't supported yet)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530595 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
596 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
597 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
598 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
599 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200600enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
601 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0),
602 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1),
603 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2),
604
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100605 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200606 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3),
607 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4),
608 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5),
609 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6),
610 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100611 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8),
612 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9),
613 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10),
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800614};
615
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200616
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200617/* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
618#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200619
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200620/* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
621#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
622
623/* maximum number of rate stages */
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200624#define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200625
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200626/* maximum number of rate table entries */
627#define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4
628
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200629/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200630 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200631 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200632 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
633 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
Johannes Berge25cf4a2008-10-23 08:51:20 +0200634 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200635 *
636 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
637 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
638 *
639 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
640 * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200641 *
642 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
643 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
644 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
645 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
646 * information
647 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
648 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
649 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
650 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
651 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
652 * information should then contain
653 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
654 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
655 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200656 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200657struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
658 s8 idx;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100659 u16 count:5,
660 flags:11;
Gustavo F. Padovan3f30fc12010-07-21 10:59:58 +0000661} __packed;
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200662
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100663#define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31
664
665static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
666 u8 mcs, u8 nss)
667{
668 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200669 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
670 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100671}
672
673static inline u8
674ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
675{
676 return rate->idx & 0xF;
677}
678
679static inline u8
680ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
681{
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200682 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100683}
684
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200685/**
686 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200687 *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200688 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
689 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
690 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
691 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
692 *
693 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200694 * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200695 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100696 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700697 * @control: union for control data
698 * @status: union for status data
699 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100700 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700701 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100702 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700703 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200704 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200705 */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200706struct ieee80211_tx_info {
707 /* common information */
708 u32 flags;
709 u8 band;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200710
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200711 u8 hw_queue;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100712
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100713 u16 ack_frame_id;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100714
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200715 union {
716 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200717 union {
718 /* rate control */
719 struct {
720 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
721 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
722 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200723 u8 use_rts:1;
724 u8 use_cts_prot:1;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200725 u8 short_preamble:1;
726 u8 skip_table:1;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200727 /* 2 bytes free */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200728 };
729 /* only needed before rate control */
730 unsigned long jiffies;
731 };
Johannes Berg25d834e2008-09-12 22:52:47 +0200732 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200733 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
734 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200735 u32 flags;
736 /* 4 bytes free */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200737 } control;
738 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200739 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Eliad Pellera0f995a2014-03-13 14:30:47 +0200740 s32 ack_signal;
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200741 u8 ampdu_ack_len;
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100742 u8 ampdu_len;
Johannes Bergd748b462012-03-28 11:04:23 +0200743 u8 antenna;
Johannes Berg02219b32014-10-07 10:38:50 +0300744 u16 tx_time;
745 void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200746 } status;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200747 struct {
748 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
749 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200750 u8 pad[4];
751
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200752 void *rate_driver_data[
753 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
754 };
755 void *driver_data[
756 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200757 };
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700758};
759
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +0300760/**
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200761 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
762 *
David Spinadel633e2712014-02-06 16:15:23 +0200763 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
764 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
765 * and the ones generated by mac80211.
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200766 *
767 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
768 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
769 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
770 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
771 */
772struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
773 const u8 *ies[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
774 size_t len[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
775 const u8 *common_ies;
776 size_t common_ie_len;
777};
778
779
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200780static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
781{
782 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
783}
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400784
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +0200785static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
786{
787 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
788}
789
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200790/**
791 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
792 *
793 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
794 *
795 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
796 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
797 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
798 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
799 *
800 * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
801 * info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
802 * instead if you need only the less space that allows.
803 */
804static inline void
805ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
806{
807 int i;
808
809 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
810 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
811 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
812 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
813 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
814 /* clear the rate counts */
815 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
816 info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
817
818 BUILD_BUG_ON(
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200819 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200820 memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
821 sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
822 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
823}
824
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400825
826/**
827 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
828 *
829 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
830 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
831 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
832 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400833 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
834 * verification has been done by the hardware.
835 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV/ICV are stripped from this frame.
836 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
837 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
Johannes Berg72abd812007-09-17 01:29:22 -0400838 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
839 * the frame.
840 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
841 * the frame.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -0800842 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
Johannes Berg6ebacbb2011-02-23 15:06:08 +0100843 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
844 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
845 * merging.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -0800846 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
847 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
848 * (including FCS) was received.
Bruno Randolfb4f28bb2008-07-30 17:19:55 +0200849 * @RX_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +0200850 * @RX_FLAG_HT: HT MCS was used and rate_idx is MCS index
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +0100851 * @RX_FLAG_VHT: VHT MCS was used and rate_index is MCS index
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +0200852 * @RX_FLAG_40MHZ: HT40 (40 MHz) was used
853 * @RX_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
Felix Fietkaufe8431f2012-03-01 18:00:07 +0100854 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
855 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +0200856 * @RX_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission, if
857 * the driver fills this value it should add %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
858 * to hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200859 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
860 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
861 * each A-MPDU
862 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_REPORT_ZEROLEN: driver reports 0-length subframes
863 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_ZEROLEN: This is a zero-length subframe, for
864 * monitoring purposes only
865 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
866 * subframes of a single A-MPDU
867 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
868 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
869 * on this subframe
870 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
871 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
Emmanuel Grumbach63c361f2014-02-05 12:48:53 +0200872 * @RX_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +0200873 * @RX_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
Simon Wunderlicha5e70692013-07-08 16:55:52 +0200874 * @RX_FLAG_10MHZ: 10 MHz (half channel) was used
875 * @RX_FLAG_5MHZ: 5 MHz (quarter channel) was used
Michal Kazior0cfcefe2013-09-23 15:34:38 +0200876 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
877 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
878 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
879 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
880 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
881 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
882 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
883 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
884 * interleaved with other frames.
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +0100885 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
886 * radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
887 * the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400888 */
889enum mac80211_rx_flags {
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200890 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0),
891 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1),
892 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3),
893 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4),
894 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5),
895 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -0800896 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200897 RX_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(8),
898 RX_FLAG_HT = BIT(9),
899 RX_FLAG_40MHZ = BIT(10),
900 RX_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(11),
901 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(12),
902 RX_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(13),
903 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(14),
904 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_REPORT_ZEROLEN = BIT(15),
905 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_ZEROLEN = BIT(16),
906 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(17),
907 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(18),
908 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(19),
909 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(20),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -0800910 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = BIT(21),
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +0100911 RX_FLAG_VHT = BIT(22),
Emmanuel Grumbach63c361f2014-02-05 12:48:53 +0200912 RX_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(23),
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +0200913 RX_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(26) | BIT(27),
Simon Wunderlicha5e70692013-07-08 16:55:52 +0200914 RX_FLAG_10MHZ = BIT(28),
915 RX_FLAG_5MHZ = BIT(29),
Michal Kazior0cfcefe2013-09-23 15:34:38 +0200916 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(30),
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +0100917 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA = BIT(31),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400918};
919
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +0200920#define RX_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 26
921
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400922/**
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +0200923 * enum mac80211_rx_vht_flags - receive VHT flags
924 *
925 * These flags are used with the @vht_flag member of
926 * &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
927 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_80MHZ: 80 MHz was used
928 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_80P80MHZ: 80+80 MHz was used
929 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_160MHZ: 160 MHz was used
Emmanuel Grumbachfb378c22014-03-04 10:35:25 +0200930 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +0200931 */
932enum mac80211_rx_vht_flags {
933 RX_VHT_FLAG_80MHZ = BIT(0),
934 RX_VHT_FLAG_80P80MHZ = BIT(1),
935 RX_VHT_FLAG_160MHZ = BIT(2),
Emmanuel Grumbachfb378c22014-03-04 10:35:25 +0200936 RX_VHT_FLAG_BF = BIT(3),
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +0200937};
938
939/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400940 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
941 *
942 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
943 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +0200944 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +0200945 *
Bruno Randolfc132bec2008-02-18 11:20:51 +0900946 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
947 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200948 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
949 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100950 * @band: the active band when this frame was received
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400951 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +0200952 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
953 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
954 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +0200955 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
956 * values were filled.
957 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
958 * support dB or unspecified units)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400959 * @antenna: antenna used
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +0200960 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +0100961 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
962 * @vht_nss: number of streams (VHT only)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400963 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_*
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +0200964 * @vht_flag: %RX_VHT_FLAG_*
Johannes Berg554891e2010-09-24 12:38:25 +0200965 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200966 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
967 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
968 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400969 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700970struct ieee80211_rx_status {
971 u64 mactime;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200972 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200973 u32 ampdu_reference;
974 u32 flag;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +0200975 u16 freq;
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +0200976 u8 vht_flag;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +0200977 u8 rate_idx;
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +0100978 u8 vht_nss;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +0200979 u8 rx_flags;
980 u8 band;
981 u8 antenna;
982 s8 signal;
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +0200983 u8 chains;
984 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200985 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700986};
987
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400988/**
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +0100989 * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
990 * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
991 * (this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
992 * bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
993 * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
994 * alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
995 * description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
996 * Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
997 * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
998 * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
999 * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1000 * then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1001 * @data field.
1002 * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1003 * the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1004 * length
1005 * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1006 *
1007 * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1008 * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1009 * data.
1010 */
1011struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1012 u32 present;
1013 u8 align;
1014 u8 oui[3];
1015 u8 subns;
1016 u8 pad;
1017 u16 len;
1018 u8 data[];
1019} __packed;
1020
1021/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001022 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1023 *
1024 * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1025 *
Johannes Berg0869aea02009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001026 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1027 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1028 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001029 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1030 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1031 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1032 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1033 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1034 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1035 * for more.
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001036 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1037 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1038 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1039 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1040 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +02001041 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1042 * operating channel.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001043 */
1044enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
Johannes Berg0869aea02009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001045 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0),
Johannes Bergae5eb022008-10-14 16:58:37 +02001046 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001047 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2),
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +02001048 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3),
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001049};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001050
Johannes Berg7a5158e2008-10-08 10:59:33 +02001051
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001052/**
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001053 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1054 *
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001055 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
Johannes Berg0869aea02009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001056 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +02001057 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001058 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
Johannes Berg47979382009-01-07 10:13:27 +01001059 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001060 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001061 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001062 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001063 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1064 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001065 */
1066enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001067 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001068 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0869aea02009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001069 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001070 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4),
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +02001071 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5),
1072 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6),
1073 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001074 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001075};
1076
1077/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001078 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1079 *
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +02001080 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1081 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1082 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1083 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1084 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001085 */
1086enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1087 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1088 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1089 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1090 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1091
1092 /* keep last */
1093 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1094};
1095
1096/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001097 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1098 *
1099 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1100 *
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001101 * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1102 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001103 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Berg9ccebe62009-04-23 10:32:36 +02001104 * @max_sleep_period: the maximum number of beacon intervals to sleep for
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001105 * before checking the beacon for a TIM bit (managed mode only); this
1106 * value will be only achievable between DTIM frames, the hardware
1107 * needs to check for the multicast traffic bit in DTIM beacons.
1108 * This variable is valid only when the CONF_PS flag is set.
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001109 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1110 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1111 * has been received and the DTIM period is known.
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001112 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1113 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1114 * the CONF_PS flag is set.
1115 *
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +02001116 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1117 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001118 *
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001119 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001120 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001121 *
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001122 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001123 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1124 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001125 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001126 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1127 * number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001128 *
1129 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1130 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001131 * configured for an HT channel.
1132 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1133 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001134 */
1135struct ieee80211_conf {
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001136 u32 flags;
Juuso Oikarinenff616382010-06-09 09:51:52 +03001137 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
Johannes Berg9ccebe62009-04-23 10:32:36 +02001138 int max_sleep_period;
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +02001139
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001140 u16 listen_interval;
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001141 u8 ps_dtim_period;
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001142
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001143 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1144
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001145 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001146 bool radar_enabled;
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001147 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001148};
1149
1150/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001151 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1152 *
1153 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1154 * operation.
1155 *
1156 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1157 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1158 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1159 * the driver passed into mac80211.
Luciano Coelho2ba45382014-10-08 09:48:35 +03001160 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1161 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001162 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1163 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001164 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001165 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1166 */
1167struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1168 u64 timestamp;
Luciano Coelho2ba45382014-10-08 09:48:35 +03001169 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001170 bool block_tx;
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001171 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001172 u8 count;
1173};
1174
1175/**
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001176 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1177 *
1178 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1179 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001180 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1181 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1182 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1183 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001184 */
1185enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1186 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001187 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1),
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001188};
1189
1190/**
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001191 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1192 *
1193 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1194 * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1195 *
Johannes Berg51fb61e2007-12-19 01:31:27 +01001196 * @type: type of this virtual interface
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001197 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1198 * or the BSS we're associated to
Johannes Berg47846c92009-11-25 17:46:19 +01001199 * @addr: address of this interface
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001200 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1201 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
Michal Kazior59af6922014-04-09 15:10:59 +02001202 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
1203 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1204 * for read access.
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001205 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1206 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1207 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1208 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001209 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1210 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001211 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1212 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1213 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1214 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1215 * processed after it switches back to %NULL.
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001216 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001217 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001218 * monitor interface (if that is requested.)
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001219 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1220 * sizeof(void *).
1221 */
1222struct ieee80211_vif {
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001223 enum nl80211_iftype type;
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001224 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
Johannes Berg47846c92009-11-25 17:46:19 +01001225 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001226 bool p2p;
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02001227 bool csa_active;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001228
1229 u8 cab_queue;
1230 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1231
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001232 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1233
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001234 u32 driver_flags;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001235
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001236#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1237 struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1238#endif
1239
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001240 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001241 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001242};
1243
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001244static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1245{
1246#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001247 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001248#endif
1249 return false;
1250}
1251
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001252/**
Johannes Bergad7e7182013-11-13 13:37:47 +01001253 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1254 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1255 *
1256 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1257 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1258 *
1259 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1260 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1261 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1262 */
1263struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1264
1265/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001266 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1267 *
1268 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1269 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1270 *
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001271 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1272 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
Johannes Berg1e359a52015-01-05 10:28:49 +01001273 * particular key.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001274 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1275 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1276 * generation in software.
Ivo van Doornc6adbd22008-04-17 21:11:18 +02001277 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1278 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001279 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
Jouni Malinen1f7d77a2009-01-08 13:32:10 +02001280 * CCMP key if it requires CCMP encryption of management frames (MFP) to
1281 * be done in software.
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001282 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comee701082012-05-09 08:11:20 +03001283 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001284 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
Johannes Berg1e359a52015-01-05 10:28:49 +01001285 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001286 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1287 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1288 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1289 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1290 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1291 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1292 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001293 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
1294 * driver for a CCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
1295 * only for managment frames (MFP).
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001296 */
1297enum ieee80211_key_flags {
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001298 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0),
1299 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1),
1300 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2),
1301 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3),
1302 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4),
1303 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5),
1304 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001305};
1306
1307/**
1308 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1309 *
1310 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1311 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1312 *
1313 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1314 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001315 * encrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001316 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001317 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1318 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1319 * @keylen: key material length
Luis R. Rodriguezffd78912008-06-21 10:02:46 -04001320 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1321 * data block:
1322 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1323 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1324 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01001325 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1326 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001327 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001328struct ieee80211_key_conf {
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001329 u32 cipher;
Felix Fietkau76708de2008-10-05 18:02:48 +02001330 u8 icv_len;
1331 u8 iv_len;
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001332 u8 hw_key_idx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001333 u8 flags;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001334 s8 keyidx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001335 u8 keylen;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001336 u8 key[0];
1337};
1338
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001339/**
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02001340 * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1341 *
1342 * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1343 * the secure packet crypto handling.
1344 *
1345 * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1346 * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1347 * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1348 * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1349 * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1350 * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1351 * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1352 * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1353 * key_idx value calculation:
1354 * (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1355 * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1356 */
1357struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1358 u32 cipher;
1359 u16 iftype;
1360 u8 hdr_len;
1361 u8 pn_len;
1362 u8 pn_off;
1363 u8 key_idx_off;
1364 u8 key_idx_mask;
1365 u8 key_idx_shift;
1366 u8 mic_len;
1367};
1368
1369/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001370 * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1371 *
1372 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1373 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1374 *
1375 * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1376 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1377 */
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001378enum set_key_cmd {
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001379 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001380};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001381
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001382/**
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01001383 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1384 *
1385 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1386 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1387 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1388 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1389 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1390 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1391 */
1392enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1393 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1394 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1395 IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1396 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1397 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1398 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1399};
1400
1401/**
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001402 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1403 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1404 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1405 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1406 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
1407 * (including 80+80 MHz)
1408 *
1409 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
1410 * correctly, the values must be sorted.
1411 */
1412enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
1413 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
1414 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
1415 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
1416 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
1417};
1418
1419/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001420 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
1421 *
1422 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001423 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001424 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
1425 */
1426struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
1427 struct rcu_head rcu_head;
1428 struct {
1429 s8 idx;
1430 u8 count;
1431 u8 count_cts;
1432 u8 count_rts;
1433 u16 flags;
1434 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
1435};
1436
1437/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001438 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
1439 *
1440 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
1441 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
1442 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
1443 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
1444 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01001445 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001446 *
1447 * @addr: MAC address
1448 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
Johannes Berg323ce792008-09-11 02:45:11 +02001449 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
Johannes Berg55d942f2013-03-01 13:07:48 +01001450 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1451 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
Johannes Berga74a8c82014-07-22 14:50:47 +02001452 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001453 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1454 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
Eliad Peller910868d2011-09-11 09:46:55 +03001455 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
1456 * if wme is supported.
1457 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001458 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001459 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
1460 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
1461 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
1462 * the station moves to associated state.
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001463 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001464 * @rates: rate control selection table
Arik Nemtsov0c4972c2014-05-01 10:17:27 +03001465 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
Arik Nemtsov8b941482014-10-22 12:32:48 +03001466 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
1467 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001468 */
1469struct ieee80211_sta {
Johannes Berg881d9482009-01-21 15:13:48 +01001470 u32 supp_rates[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001471 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
1472 u16 aid;
Johannes Bergd9fe60d2008-10-09 12:13:49 +02001473 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
Mahesh Palivela818255e2012-10-10 11:33:04 +00001474 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
Arik Nemtsov39df6002011-06-27 23:58:45 +03001475 bool wme;
Eliad Peller9533b4a2011-08-23 14:37:47 +03001476 u8 uapsd_queues;
1477 u8 max_sp;
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001478 u8 rx_nss;
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001479 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001480 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001481 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
Arik Nemtsov0c4972c2014-05-01 10:17:27 +03001482 bool tdls;
Arik Nemtsov8b941482014-10-22 12:32:48 +03001483 bool tdls_initiator;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001484
1485 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001486 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001487};
1488
1489/**
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001490 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
1491 *
1492 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
Sujith38a6cc72010-05-19 11:32:30 +05301493 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001494 *
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001495 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
1496 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
1497 */
Christian Lamparter89fad572008-12-09 16:28:06 +01001498enum sta_notify_cmd {
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001499 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
1500};
1501
1502/**
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02001503 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
1504 *
1505 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
1506 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
1507 */
1508struct ieee80211_tx_control {
1509 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1510};
1511
1512/**
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001513 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
1514 *
1515 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
1516 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
1517 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
1518 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
1519 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
1520 *
Johannes Bergaf65cd962009-11-17 18:18:36 +01001521 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
1522 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
1523 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
1524 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
1525 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
1526 * algorithm.
1527 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
1528 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
1529 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
1530 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
1531 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
1532 * CCK frames.
1533 *
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001534 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
1535 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
1536 * the FCS at the end.
1537 *
1538 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
1539 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
1540 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
1541 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
1542 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
1543 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07001544 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001545 *
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001546 * @IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_SLOT_INCAPABLE:
1547 * Hardware is not capable of short slot operation on the 2.4 GHz band.
1548 *
1549 * @IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_PREAMBLE_INCAPABLE:
1550 * Hardware is not capable of receiving frames with short preamble on
1551 * the 2.4 GHz band.
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001552 *
1553 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
1554 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
1555 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
1556 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
1557 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001558 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
1559 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
1560 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
1561 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
1562 *
Tomas Winkler06ff47b2008-06-18 17:53:44 +03001563 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
1564 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
1565 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
Sujith8b30b1f2008-10-24 09:55:27 +05301566 *
1567 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
1568 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
Kalle Valo520eb822008-12-18 23:35:27 +02001569 *
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001570 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
1571 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
1572 *
1573 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
1574 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
1575 * stack support for dynamic PS.
1576 *
1577 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
1578 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
Jouni Malinen4375d082009-01-08 13:32:11 +02001579 *
1580 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
1581 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02001582 *
Kalle Valoab133152010-01-12 10:42:31 +02001583 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_UAPSD:
1584 * Hardware supports Unscheduled Automatic Power Save Delivery
1585 * (U-APSD) in managed mode. The mode is configured with
1586 * conf_tx() operation.
Vivek Natarajan375177b2010-02-09 14:50:28 +05301587 *
1588 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
1589 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
1590 * the stack.
1591 *
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02001592 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001593 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
1594 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02001595 *
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +02001596 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
1597 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
1598 * dtim_period).
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02001599 *
1600 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
1601 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
1602 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
1603 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
1604 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
1605 * only in that case.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02001606 *
1607 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
1608 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
1609 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
1610 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
1611 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
1612 * the PS mode of connected stations.
Arik Nemtsovedf6b782011-08-30 09:32:38 +03001613 *
1614 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
1615 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
1616 * software.
Eliad Peller885bd8e2012-02-02 17:44:55 +02001617 *
Johannes Berg4b6f1dd2012-04-03 14:35:57 +02001618 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
1619 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
1620 * active interfaces.
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001621 *
Ben Greeare27513f2014-10-22 12:23:03 -07001622 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
1623 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as
1624 * desired (and thus have them named as desired).
1625 *
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001626 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
1627 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
1628 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
1629 * control for more details.
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001630 *
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001631 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
1632 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
1633 *
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001634 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
1635 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
1636 * is supported.
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +01001637 *
1638 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
1639 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001640 *
Johannes Berg919be622013-10-14 10:05:16 +02001641 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
1642 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
1643 * using aggregation for such frames.)
1644 *
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001645 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
1646 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
1647 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
1648 * CSA frame.
Luciano Coelho5d52ee82014-02-27 14:33:47 +02001649 *
Ido Yarivc70f59a2014-07-29 15:39:14 +03001650 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
1651 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
1652 *
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02001653 * @IEEE80211_SINGLE_HW_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
1654 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001655 */
1656enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
Johannes Bergaf65cd962009-11-17 18:18:36 +01001657 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL = 1<<0,
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001658 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS = 1<<1,
1659 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING = 1<<2,
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001660 IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_SLOT_INCAPABLE = 1<<3,
1661 IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_PREAMBLE_INCAPABLE = 1<<4,
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001662 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC = 1<<5,
Johannes Berg7fee5372009-01-30 11:13:06 +01001663 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM = 1<<6,
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +02001664 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC = 1<<7,
Johannes Berg7fee5372009-01-30 11:13:06 +01001665 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT = 1<<8,
1666 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION = 1<<9,
1667 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS = 1<<10,
1668 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK = 1<<11,
1669 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS = 1<<12,
1670 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE = 1<<13,
Johannes Berg4b6f1dd2012-04-03 14:35:57 +02001671 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF = 1<<14,
Ben Greeare27513f2014-10-22 12:23:03 -07001672 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF = 1<<15,
1673 /* free slot */
Kalle Valoab133152010-01-12 10:42:31 +02001674 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = 1<<17,
Vivek Natarajan375177b2010-02-09 14:50:28 +05301675 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS = 1<<18,
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02001676 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR = 1<<19,
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001677 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL = 1<<20,
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02001678 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK = 1<<21,
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02001679 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS = 1<<22,
Arik Nemtsovedf6b782011-08-30 09:32:38 +03001680 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW = 1<<23,
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001681 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE = 1<<24,
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001682 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF = 1<<25,
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +01001683 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY = 1<<26,
Felix Fietkau2dfca312013-08-20 19:43:54 +02001684 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES = 1<<27,
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001685 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA = 1<<28,
Ido Yarivc70f59a2014-07-29 15:39:14 +03001686 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS = 1<<29,
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02001687 IEEE80211_SINGLE_HW_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS = 1<<30,
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001688};
1689
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001690/**
1691 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001692 *
1693 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
1694 * information for an 802.11 PHY.
1695 *
1696 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
1697 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
1698 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001699 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
1700 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001701 *
1702 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
1703 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001704 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
1705 * along with this structure.
1706 *
1707 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
1708 *
1709 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
1710 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
1711 *
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01001712 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
1713 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001714 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001715 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001716 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001717 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001718 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001719 * that HW supports
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001720 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001721 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +02001722 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
1723 * queues need to have configurable access parameters.
1724 *
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01001725 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
1726 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
1727 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001728 *
1729 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1730 * within &struct ieee80211_vif.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001731 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1732 * within &struct ieee80211_sta.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001733 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1734 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02001735 *
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02001736 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
1737 * can handle.
1738 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
1739 * the hw can report back.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001740 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04001741 *
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02001742 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
1743 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
1744 * aggregation.
1745 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
1746 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
1747 * it shouldn't be set.
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01001748 *
1749 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
1750 * aggregate an HT driver will transmit, used by the peer as a
1751 * hint to size its reorder buffer.
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001752 *
1753 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
1754 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02001755 *
1756 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
1757 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
1758 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_* values, only
1759 * adding _BW is supported today.
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03001760 *
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01001761 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
1762 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
1763 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_* values.
1764 *
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03001765 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
1766 * from this HW. Note only HW checksum features are currently
1767 * compatible with mac80211. Other feature bits will be rejected.
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02001768 *
1769 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
1770 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
1771 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
1772 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
1773 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
1774 * neither enabled.
1775 *
1776 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
1777 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
1778 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02001779 *
1780 * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
1781 * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
1782 * supported by HW.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001783 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001784struct ieee80211_hw {
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001785 struct ieee80211_conf conf;
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001786 struct wiphy *wiphy;
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01001787 const char *rate_control_algorithm;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001788 void *priv;
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001789 u32 flags;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001790 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01001791 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001792 int vif_data_size;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001793 int sta_data_size;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001794 int chanctx_data_size;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001795 u16 queues;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001796 u16 max_listen_interval;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001797 s8 max_signal;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001798 u8 max_rates;
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02001799 u8 max_report_rates;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001800 u8 max_rate_tries;
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02001801 u8 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01001802 u8 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001803 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02001804 u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01001805 u16 radiotap_vht_details;
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03001806 netdev_features_t netdev_features;
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02001807 u8 uapsd_queues;
1808 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02001809 u8 n_cipher_schemes;
1810 const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001811};
1812
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001813/**
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02001814 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
1815 *
1816 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
1817 * @req: cfg80211 request.
1818 */
1819struct ieee80211_scan_request {
1820 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
1821
1822 /* Keep last */
1823 struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
1824};
1825
1826/**
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02001827 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
1828 *
1829 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
1830 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
1831 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
1832 * @status: channel-switch response status
1833 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
1834 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
1835 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
1836 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
1837 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
1838 */
1839struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
1840 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1841 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
1842 u8 action_code;
1843 u32 status;
1844 u32 timestamp;
1845 u16 switch_time;
1846 u16 switch_timeout;
1847 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
1848 u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
1849};
1850
1851/**
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08001852 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
1853 *
1854 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
1855 *
1856 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
1857 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
1858 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
1859 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
1860 * is already used internally by mac80211.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01001861 *
1862 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08001863 */
1864struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
1865
1866/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001867 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
1868 *
1869 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
1870 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
1871 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001872static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
1873{
1874 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
1875}
1876
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001877/**
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04001878 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001879 *
1880 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
1881 * @addr: the address to set
1882 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001883static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 *addr)
1884{
1885 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
1886}
1887
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001888static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
1889ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02001890 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001891{
Larry Fingeraa331df2012-04-06 16:35:53 -05001892 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001893 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001894 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001895}
1896
1897static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
1898ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02001899 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001900{
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02001901 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001902 return NULL;
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02001903 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001904}
1905
1906static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
1907ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02001908 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001909{
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001910 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001911 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001912 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001913}
1914
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001915/**
Johannes Berg6096de72011-11-04 11:18:10 +01001916 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
1917 * @hw: the hardware
1918 * @skb: the skb
1919 *
1920 * Free a transmit skb. Use this funtion when some failure
1921 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
1922 */
1923void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
1924
1925/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001926 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04001927 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001928 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
1929 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
1930 *
1931 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
1932 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01001933 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
1934 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
1935 * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001936 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
1937 * VLANs are configured for an access point.
1938 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001939 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
1940 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
1941 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
1942 *
1943 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
1944 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
1945 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
1946 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
1947 *
1948 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
1949 *
1950 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
1951 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
1952 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
1953 * based on the receive flags.
1954 *
1955 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
1956 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
1957 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
1958 * keys.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02001959 *
1960 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
1961 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
1962 * handler.
1963 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
Lucas De Marchi25985ed2011-03-30 22:57:33 -03001964 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02001965 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
1966 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04001967 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02001968 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03001969 *
1970 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
1971 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
1972 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04001973 */
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04001974
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001975/**
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001976 * DOC: Powersave support
1977 *
1978 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
1979 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001980 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
1981 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
1982 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
1983 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
1984 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
1985 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
1986 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
1987 * it finds traffic directed to it.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001988 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001989 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
1990 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
1991 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04001992 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
1993 * back to sleep at appropriate times.
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001994 *
1995 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
1996 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
1997 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001998 *
1999 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
2000 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
2001 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
2002 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002003 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
2004 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002005 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002006 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002007 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
2008 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
2009 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
2010 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
2011 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
2012 * periods.
2013 *
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04002014 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002015 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
2016 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
2017 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
2018 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
2019 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
2020 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
2021 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
2022 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
2023 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
2024 *
2025 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
2026 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002027 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002028 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
2029 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
2030 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
2031 *
2032 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
2033 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002034 */
2035
2036/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002037 * DOC: Beacon filter support
2038 *
2039 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
Justin P. Mattock42b2aa82011-11-28 20:31:00 -08002040 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002041 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
2042 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
2043 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
2044 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
2045 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
2046 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01002047 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
2048 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002049 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
2050 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
2051 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
2052 *
2053 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
2054 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
2055 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
2056 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
2057 *
2058 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
2059 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
2060 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
2061 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
2062 * - a list of information element IDs
2063 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
2064 *
2065 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
2066 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
2067 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
2068 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
2069 * vendor information elements.
2070 *
2071 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
2072 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
2073 *
2074 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
2075 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
2076 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
2077 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
2078 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
2079 * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
2080 *
2081 *
2082 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
2083 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
2084 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
2085 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
2086 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
2087 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
2088 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
2089 * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
2090 *
2091 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
2092 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
2093 * signal strength threshold checking.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002094 */
2095
2096/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01002097 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
2098 *
2099 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
2100 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
2101 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
2102 * "11.2.3 SM power save".
2103 *
2104 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
2105 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
2106 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
2107 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
2108 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
2109 * hardware flags.
2110 *
2111 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
2112 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
2113 * turned off otherwise.
2114 *
2115 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
2116 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
2117 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
2118 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
2119 */
2120
2121/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002122 * DOC: Frame filtering
2123 *
2124 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
2125 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
2126 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
2127 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
2128 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
2129 *
2130 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
2131 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
2132 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
2133 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002134 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
2135 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
2136 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
2137 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
2138 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
2139 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
2140 * @total_flags with the new flag states.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002141 *
2142 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
2143 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
2144 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
2145 * or dropped.
2146 *
Michael Bueschd0f5afb2008-02-12 20:12:45 +01002147 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
2148 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
2149 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
2150 * the flag, but not clear it.
2151 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
2152 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
2153 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
2154 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
2155 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
2156 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
2157 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
2158 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002159 */
2160
2161/**
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002162 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
2163 *
2164 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
2165 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
2166 * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
2167 *
2168 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
2169 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
2170 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
2171 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
2172 * the driver code.
2173 *
2174 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
2175 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
2176 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
2177 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
2178 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
2179 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
2180 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
2181 *
2182 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
2183 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
2184 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
2185 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
2186 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
2187 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
2188 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
2189 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
2190 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
2191 * @sta_notify callback.
2192 *
2193 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
2194 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
2195 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
2196 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
2197 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
2198 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
2199 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002200 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002201 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
2202 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
2203 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
2204 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
2205 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
2206 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
2207 *
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002208 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
2209 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
2210 *
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002211 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
2212 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
2213 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
2214 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
2215 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
2216 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
2217 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
2218 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
2219 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
2220 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
2221 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
2222 *
2223 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
2224 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
2225 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
2226 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
2227 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
2228 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
2229 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
2230 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
2231 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
2232 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002233 * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002234 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
2235 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
2236 * buffers for those TIDs contain.
2237 *
2238 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
2239 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
2240 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
2241 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
2242 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002243 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002244 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
2245 *
2246 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
2247 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
2248 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
2249 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002250 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
Johannes Bergb77cf4f2014-01-09 00:00:38 +01002251 *
2252 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
2253 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
2254 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
2255 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002256 */
2257
2258/**
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002259 * DOC: HW queue control
2260 *
2261 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
2262 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
2263 * was problematic for a few reasons:
2264 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
2265 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
2266 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
2267 *
2268 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
2269 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
2270 * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
2271 *
2272 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
2273 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
2274 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
2275 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
2276 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
2277 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
2278 * the hardware queue.
2279 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
2280 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
2281 *
2282 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
2283 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
2284 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
2285 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
2286 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
2287 *
2288 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
2289 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
2290 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8
2291 * off-channel queue: 9
2292 *
2293 * It would then set up the hardware like this:
2294 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
2295 *
2296 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
2297 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
2298 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
2299 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
2300 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
2301 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2302 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
2303 *
2304 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
2305 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
2306 *
2307 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2308 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
2309 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
2310 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
2311 */
2312
2313/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002314 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
2315 *
2316 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
2317 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
2318 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
2319 * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
2320 *
2321 * @FIF_PROMISC_IN_BSS: promiscuous mode within your BSS,
2322 * think of the BSS as your network segment and then this corresponds
2323 * to the regular ethernet device promiscuous mode.
2324 *
2325 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
2326 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
2327 * multicast address.
2328 *
2329 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
2330 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
2331 *
2332 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
2333 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
2334 *
2335 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
2336 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
2337 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
2338 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
2339 * honour this flag if possible.
2340 *
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002341 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll), if PROMISC_IN_BSS
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002342 * is not set then only those addressed to this station.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002343 *
2344 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002345 *
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002346 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames, if PROMISC_IN_BSS is not set then only
2347 * those addressed to this station.
2348 *
2349 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002350 */
2351enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
2352 FIF_PROMISC_IN_BSS = 1<<0,
2353 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1,
2354 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2,
2355 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3,
2356 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4,
2357 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5,
2358 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6,
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002359 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7,
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002360 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8,
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002361};
2362
2363/**
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002364 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
2365 *
2366 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
2367 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002368 *
2369 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
2370 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02002371 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002372 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
2373 *
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002374 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
2375 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
2376 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002377 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002378 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
2379 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
2380 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
2381 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
2382 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
2383 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
2384 * session is gone and removes the station.
2385 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
2386 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
2387 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
2388 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002389 */
2390enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
2391 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
2392 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02002393 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002394 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
2395 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
2396 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002397 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002398};
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002399
2400/**
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002401 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
2402 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002403 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
2404 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002405 */
2406enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
2407 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002408 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002409};
2410
2411/**
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002412 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
2413 *
2414 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01002415 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
2416 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
2417 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002418 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002419 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
2420 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
2421 * the peer.
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002422 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
2423 * by the peer
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002424 */
2425enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
2426 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0),
2427 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1),
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002428 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002429 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3),
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002430};
2431
2432/**
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02002433 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
2434 *
2435 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
2436 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
2437 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vise versa).
2438 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
2439 * operations compared to other operations/flows.
2440 *
2441 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
2442 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
2443 * for sending managment frames offchannel.
2444 */
2445enum ieee80211_roc_type {
2446 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
2447 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
2448};
2449
2450/**
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02002451 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_complete_type - reconfig type
2452 *
2453 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
2454 * reconfiguration type was completed.
2455 *
2456 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
2457 * (also due to resume() callback returning 1)
2458 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
2459 * of wowlan configuration)
2460 */
2461enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
2462 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
2463 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
2464};
2465
2466/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002467 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
2468 *
2469 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
2470 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
2471 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
2472 *
2473 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
2474 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
2475 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
Johannes Bergeefce912008-05-17 00:57:13 +02002476 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002477 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002478 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002479 *
2480 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
2481 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
2482 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
2483 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
2484 * or zero.
2485 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
2486 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
2487 * is added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002488 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002489 *
2490 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
2491 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
2492 * it must turn off frame reception.)
2493 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04002494 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
2495 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002496 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002497 *
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002498 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
2499 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
2500 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
2501 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
2502 * reconfigured at resume time.
Johannes Berg2b4562d2011-07-02 00:02:01 +02002503 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
2504 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
2505 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
2506 * must return 1 from this function.
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002507 *
2508 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
2509 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
2510 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
2511 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
2512 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
2513 *
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02002514 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
2515 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
2516 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
2517 * in suspend().
2518 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002519 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002520 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002521 * and @stop must be implemented.
2522 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
2523 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
2524 * interface is given in the conf parameter.
2525 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
2526 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002527 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002528 *
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02002529 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
2530 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
2531 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
2532 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
2533 * found by the interface iteration callbacks.
2534 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002535 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
2536 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
2537 * and no monitor interfaces are present.
2538 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
2539 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
2540 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
2541 * MAC address of the device going away.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002542 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002543 *
2544 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
2545 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002546 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002547 * if it does. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002548 *
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01002549 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
2550 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
2551 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
2552 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
2553 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002554 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
2555 * can sleep.
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01002556 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002557 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
2558 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
2559 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
2560 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002561 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
2562 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002563 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002564 *
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07002565 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002566 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002567 *
2568 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002569 * This callback is only called between add_interface and
2570 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01002571 * is enabled.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002572 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002573 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002574 *
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002575 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
2576 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
2577 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
Kalle Valoeb807fb2010-01-24 14:55:12 +02002578 * The callback must be atomic.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002579 *
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02002580 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
2581 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
2582 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
2583 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
2584 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
2585 *
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03002586 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
2587 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
2588 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
2589 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002590 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01002591 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
Kalle Valo9050bdd2009-03-22 21:57:21 +02002592 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
2593 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
Johannes Bergde95a542009-04-01 11:58:36 +02002594 * that power save is disabled.
2595 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
2596 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
2597 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
2598 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
2599 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
2600 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
2601 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002602 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002603 *
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03002604 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
2605 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
2606 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
2607 * ieee80211_scan_completed().
2608 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
2609 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
2610 * The callback can sleep.
2611 *
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03002612 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
2613 * specific intervals. The driver must call the
2614 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
2615 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
2616 *
2617 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01002618 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03002619 *
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002620 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
2621 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02002622 * The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
2623 * the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
2624 * can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002625 *
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002626 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
2627 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
2628 * this notification.
2629 * The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002630 *
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002631 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
2632 * Returns zero if statistics are available.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002633 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002634 *
Johannes Berg62da92f2007-12-19 02:03:31 +01002635 * @get_tkip_seq: If your device implements TKIP encryption in hardware this
2636 * callback should be provided to read the TKIP transmit IVs (both IV32
2637 * and IV16) for the given key from hardware.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002638 * The callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002639 *
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02002640 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
2641 * if the device does fragmentation by itself; if this callback is
2642 * implemented then the stack will not do fragmentation.
2643 * The callback can sleep.
2644 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002645 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002646 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002647 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002648 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
2649 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
2650 *
2651 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01002652 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
2653 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
2654 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
2655 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
2656 * This callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002657 *
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05302658 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
2659 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
2660 * and @sta_remove_debugfs should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
2661 * conditional. This callback can sleep.
2662 *
2663 * @sta_remove_debugfs: Remove the debugfs files which were added using
2664 * @sta_add_debugfs. This callback can sleep.
2665 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002666 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02002667 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
2668 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
2669 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01002670 *
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01002671 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
2672 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
2673 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
2674 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01002675 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
2676 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
2677 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
2678 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
2679 * The callback can sleep.
2680 *
2681 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
2682 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
2683 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
2684 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
2685 * in @sta_state.
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01002686 * The callback can sleep.
2687 *
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002688 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
2689 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
2690 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
2691 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
2692 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
2693 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
2694 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Bergf815e2b2014-11-19 00:10:42 +01002695 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
2696 * is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
2697 * the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002698 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002699 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
Johannes Bergfe3fa822008-09-08 11:05:09 +02002700 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002701 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002702 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002703 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002704 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01002705 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01002706 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002707 * The callback can sleep.
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01002708 *
2709 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02002710 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01002711 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002712 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002713 *
2714 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
2715 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
2716 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
2717 * TSF synchronization.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002718 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002719 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002720 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
2721 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
2722 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002723 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002724 * The callback can sleep.
Ron Rindjunskyd3c990f2007-11-26 16:14:34 +02002725 *
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002726 * @ampdu_action: Perform a certain A-MPDU action
2727 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
2728 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
2729 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action. Starting sequence number (@ssn)
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002730 * is the first frame we expect to perform the action on. Notice
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02002731 * that TX/RX_STOP can pass NULL for this parameter.
Johannes Berg0b01f032011-01-18 13:51:05 +01002732 * The @buf_size parameter is only valid when the action is set to
2733 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL and indicates the peer's reorder
Johannes Berg5312c3f2011-04-01 13:52:34 +02002734 * buffer size (number of subframes) for this session -- the driver
2735 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than this
2736 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
2737 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
2738 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
2739 * - TX: 1.....7
2740 * - RX: 2....7 (lost frame #1)
2741 * - TX: 8..1...
2742 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
2743 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
2744 * - TX: 1 or 18 or 81
2745 * Even "189" would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
2746 *
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002747 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
Johannes Berg85ad1812010-06-10 10:21:49 +02002748 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02002749 *
Randy Dunlap4e8998f2010-05-21 11:28:33 -07002750 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
2751 *
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02002752 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
2753 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
2754 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002755 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02002756 *
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01002757 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
2758 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
Lorenzo Bianconia4bcaf52014-09-04 23:57:41 +02002759 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
2760 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
2761 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01002762 *
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03002763 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
2764 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07002765 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berga80f7c02009-12-23 13:15:32 +01002766 *
2767 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01002768 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
2769 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
2770 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
2771 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02002772 * Note that vif can be NULL.
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01002773 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02002774 *
2775 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
2776 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
2777 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
2778 * completion of the channel switch.
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04002779 *
Bruno Randolf79b1c462010-11-24 14:34:41 +09002780 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
2781 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
2782 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
2783 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
2784 *
2785 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01002786 *
2787 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
2788 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
2789 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
2790 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
2791 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
2792 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02002793 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02002794 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
2795 * must be accepted in this case.
2796 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01002797 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
2798 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05002799 *
2800 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
2801 *
2802 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05302803 *
2804 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
2805 * queues before entering power save.
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05302806 *
2807 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
2808 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
2809 * The callback can sleep.
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07002810 * @rssi_callback: Notify driver when the average RSSI goes above/below
2811 * thresholds that were registered previously. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002812 *
2813 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
2814 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
2815 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
2816 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002817 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002818 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
2819 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
2820 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
2821 * more-data bit must always be set.
2822 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
2823 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
Johannes Bergdeeaee192011-09-29 16:04:35 +02002824 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
2825 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
2826 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
2827 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
2828 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
2829 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002830 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
2831 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
2832 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002833 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
2834 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02002835 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002836 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002837 * This callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02002838 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
2839 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
2840 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002841 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02002842 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
2843 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
2844 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
2845 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02002846 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002847 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02002848 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
2849 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
2850 * This callback must be atomic.
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07002851 *
2852 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count.
2853 *
2854 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
2855 *
2856 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
2857 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
2858 *
Victor Goldenshtein66572cf2012-06-21 10:56:46 +03002859 * @get_rssi: Get current signal strength in dBm, the function is optional
2860 * and can sleep.
2861 *
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02002862 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
2863 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
2864 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
2865 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
2866 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
2867 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
2868 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
2869 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
2870 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
2871 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
2872 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
2873 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02002874 *
Arik Nemtsovee10f2c2014-06-11 17:18:27 +03002875 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
2876 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
2877 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
2878 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
2879 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
2880 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
2881 * 2 * (DTIM period).
2882 * The callback is optional and can sleep.
2883 *
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02002884 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
2885 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
2886 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
2887 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
2888 * channel context with different settings
2889 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
2890 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
2891 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
2892 * unbound from vif.
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03002893 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
2894 * another, as specified in the list of
2895 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
2896 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
2897 *
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02002898 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
2899 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
2900 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
2901 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
2902 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
2903 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
2904 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01002905 *
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02002906 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
2907 * during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
2908 * This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
2909 * indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
2910 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg8f21b0a2013-01-11 00:28:01 +01002911 *
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01002912 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
2913 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
2914 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02002915 *
2916 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
2917 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
2918 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02002919 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02002920 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
2921 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02002922 * 1 using ieee80211_csa_is_complete() after the beacon has been
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02002923 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02002924 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
2925 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03002926 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
2927 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
2928 * gets a CSA or an userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
2929 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
Luciano Coelhof1d65582014-10-08 09:48:38 +03002930 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
2931 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
2932 * driver to go back to a normal configuration.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02002933 *
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02002934 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
2935 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
2936 * channel context is bound before this is called.
2937 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02002938 *
2939 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
2940 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
2941 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
Felix Fietkau5b3dc422014-10-26 00:32:53 +02002942 *
2943 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
2944 * and hardware limits.
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02002945 *
2946 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
2947 * is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
2948 * and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
2949 * driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
2950 * the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
2951 * The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
2952 * optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
2953 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
2954 * peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02002955 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
2956 * response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
2957 * parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
2958 * an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
2959 * response template is provided, together with the location of the
2960 * switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
2961 * the function call.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002962 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002963struct ieee80211_ops {
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02002964 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2965 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
2966 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002967 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002968 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002969#ifdef CONFIG_PM
2970 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
2971 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg6d525632012-04-04 15:05:25 +02002972 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002973#endif
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002974 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01002975 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02002976 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2977 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02002978 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002979 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01002980 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02002981 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01002982 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2983 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2984 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
2985 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergb2abb6e2011-07-19 10:39:53 +02002986
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02002987 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
2988 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
2989
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002990 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Jiri Pirko22bedad32010-04-01 21:22:57 +00002991 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002992 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2993 unsigned int changed_flags,
2994 unsigned int *total_flags,
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002995 u64 multicast);
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002996 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2997 bool set);
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04002998 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01002999 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04003000 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02003001 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergb3fbdcf2010-01-21 11:40:47 +01003002 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3003 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
3004 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3005 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02003006 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3007 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3008 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03003009 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3010 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
Johannes Berga060bbf2010-04-27 11:59:34 +02003011 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02003012 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03003013 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3014 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003015 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3016 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3017 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
David Spinadel633e2712014-02-06 16:15:23 +02003018 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01003019 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003020 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02003021 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3022 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3023 const u8 *mac_addr);
3024 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3025 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003026 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3027 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
Johannes Berg62da92f2007-12-19 02:03:31 +01003028 void (*get_tkip_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 hw_key_idx,
3029 u32 *iv32, u16 *iv16);
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02003030 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003031 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003032 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3033 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3034 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3035 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303036#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
3037 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3038 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3039 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3040 struct dentry *dir);
3041 void (*sta_remove_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3042 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3043 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3044 struct dentry *dir);
3045#endif
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003046 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003047 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01003048 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3049 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3050 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
3051 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01003052 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3053 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3054 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003055 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3056 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3057 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3058 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergf815e2b2014-11-19 00:10:42 +01003059 void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3060 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3061 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Eliad Peller8a3a3c82011-10-02 10:15:52 +02003062 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga3304b02012-03-28 11:04:24 +02003063 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003064 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
Eliad Peller37a41b42011-09-21 14:06:11 +03003065 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3066 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3067 u64 tsf);
3068 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003069 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02003070 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01003071 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02003072 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action,
Johannes Berg0b01f032011-01-18 13:51:05 +01003073 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid, u16 *ssn,
3074 u8 buf_size);
Holger Schurig12897232010-04-19 10:23:57 +02003075 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
3076 struct survey_info *survey);
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003077 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Lorenzo Bianconia4bcaf52014-09-04 23:57:41 +02003078 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003079#ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03003080 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3081 void *data, int len);
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07003082 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
3083 struct netlink_callback *cb,
3084 void *data, int len);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003085#endif
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02003086 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3087 u32 queues, bool drop);
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003088 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Luciano Coelho0f791eb42014-10-08 09:48:40 +03003089 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003090 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Bruno Randolf15d96752010-11-10 12:50:56 +09003091 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
3092 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003093
3094 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Eliad Peller49884562012-11-19 17:05:09 +02003095 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003096 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02003097 int duration,
3098 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003099 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05003100 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
3101 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3102 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05303103 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05303104 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3105 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07003106 void (*rssi_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Emmanuel Grumbach887da912013-01-20 17:32:41 +02003107 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07003108 enum ieee80211_rssi_event rssi_event);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003109
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003110 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3111 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3112 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3113 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3114 bool more_data);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003115 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3116 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3117 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3118 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3119 bool more_data);
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07003120
3121 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3122 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
3123 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3124 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3125 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
3126 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3127 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3128 u32 sset, u8 *data);
Victor Goldenshtein66572cf2012-06-21 10:56:46 +03003129 int (*get_rssi)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3130 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, s8 *rssi_dbm);
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003131
3132 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3133 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003134
Arik Nemtsovee10f2c2014-06-11 17:18:27 +03003135 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3136 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3137
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003138 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3139 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3140 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3141 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3142 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3143 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
3144 u32 changed);
3145 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3146 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3147 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3148 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3149 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3150 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003151 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3152 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
3153 int n_vifs,
3154 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01003155
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02003156 void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3157 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01003158
3159#if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
3160 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3161 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3162 struct inet6_dev *idev);
3163#endif
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003164 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3165 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3166 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003167 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3168 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3169 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003170
Luciano Coelhof1d65582014-10-08 09:48:38 +03003171 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3172 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3173
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003174 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3175 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02003176 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Felix Fietkau5b3dc422014-10-26 00:32:53 +02003177 int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3178 int *dbm);
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003179
3180 int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3181 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3182 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
3183 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003184 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003185 void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3186 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3187 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003188 void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3189 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3190 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003191};
3192
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003193/**
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003194 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
3195 *
3196 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3197 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3198 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3199 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3200 * @priv_data_len.
3201 *
3202 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3203 * @ops: callbacks for this device
3204 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
3205 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
3206 *
3207 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
3208 */
3209struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
3210 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
3211 const char *requested_name);
3212
3213/**
3214 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003215 *
3216 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3217 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3218 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3219 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3220 * @priv_data_len.
3221 *
3222 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3223 * @ops: callbacks for this device
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003224 *
3225 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003226 */
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003227static inline
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003228struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003229 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
3230{
3231 return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
3232}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003233
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003234/**
3235 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
3236 *
Johannes Bergdbbea672008-02-26 14:34:06 +01003237 * You must call this function before any other functions in
3238 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
3239 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003240 *
3241 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003242 *
3243 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003244 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003245int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3246
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003247/**
3248 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
3249 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
3250 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
3251 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
3252 */
3253struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
3254 int throughput;
3255 int blink_time;
3256};
3257
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003258/**
3259 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
3260 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
3261 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
3262 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
3263 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
3264 */
3265enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
3266 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0),
3267 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1),
3268 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2),
3269};
3270
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003271#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Joe Perches10dd9b72013-07-31 17:31:37 -07003272char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3273char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3274char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3275char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3276char *__ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3277 unsigned int flags,
3278 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3279 unsigned int blink_table_len);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003280#endif
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003281/**
3282 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
3283 *
3284 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3285 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3286 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3287 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3288 *
3289 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003290 *
3291 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003292 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003293static inline char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
3294{
3295#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3296 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
3297#else
3298 return NULL;
3299#endif
3300}
3301
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003302/**
3303 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
3304 *
3305 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3306 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3307 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3308 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3309 *
3310 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003311 *
3312 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003313 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003314static inline char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
3315{
3316#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3317 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
3318#else
3319 return NULL;
3320#endif
3321}
3322
Ivo van Doorncdcb006f2008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003323/**
3324 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
3325 *
3326 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3327 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3328 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3329 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3330 *
3331 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003332 *
3333 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb006f2008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003334 */
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003335static inline char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
3336{
3337#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3338 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
3339#else
3340 return NULL;
3341#endif
3342}
3343
Ivo van Doorncdcb006f2008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003344/**
3345 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
3346 *
3347 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3348 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3349 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3350 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3351 *
3352 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003353 *
3354 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb006f2008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003355 */
3356static inline char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
3357{
3358#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3359 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
3360#else
3361 return NULL;
3362#endif
3363}
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003364
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003365/**
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003366 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
3367 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003368 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003369 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
3370 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
3371 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003372 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
3373 * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
3374 *
3375 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003376 */
3377static inline char *
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003378ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003379 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3380 unsigned int blink_table_len)
3381{
3382#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003383 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003384 blink_table_len);
3385#else
3386 return NULL;
3387#endif
3388}
3389
3390/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003391 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
3392 *
3393 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
3394 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
3395 *
3396 * @hw: the hardware to unregister
3397 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003398void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3399
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003400/**
3401 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
3402 *
3403 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
3404 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07003405 * before calling this function.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003406 *
3407 * @hw: the hardware to free
3408 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003409void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3410
Johannes Bergf2753dd2009-04-14 10:09:24 +02003411/**
3412 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
3413 *
3414 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
3415 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
3416 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
3417 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
3418 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
3419 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
3420 *
3421 * @hw: the hardware to restart
3422 */
3423void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3424
Johannes Berg06d181a2014-02-04 20:51:09 +01003425/**
3426 * ieee80211_napi_add - initialize mac80211 NAPI context
3427 * @hw: the hardware to initialize the NAPI context on
3428 * @napi: the NAPI context to initialize
3429 * @napi_dev: dummy NAPI netdevice, here to not waste the space if the
3430 * driver doesn't use NAPI
3431 * @poll: poll function
3432 * @weight: default weight
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003433 *
Johannes Berg06d181a2014-02-04 20:51:09 +01003434 * See also netif_napi_add().
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003435 */
Johannes Berg06d181a2014-02-04 20:51:09 +01003436void ieee80211_napi_add(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct napi_struct *napi,
3437 struct net_device *napi_dev,
3438 int (*poll)(struct napi_struct *, int),
3439 int weight);
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003440
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003441/**
3442 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
3443 *
3444 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
Zhu Yie3cf8b3f2010-03-29 17:35:07 +08003445 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
3446 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
3447 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
3448 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003449 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003450 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003451 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
3452 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003453 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3454 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003455 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003456 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Bergd20ef632009-10-11 15:10:40 +02003457 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003458 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3459 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003460 */
John W. Linville103bf9f2009-08-20 16:34:15 -04003461void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003462
3463/**
3464 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
3465 *
3466 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003467 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
3468 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003469 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003470 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
3471 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003472 *
3473 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3474 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003475 */
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02003476void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003477
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003478/**
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003479 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
3480 *
3481 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
3482 * (internally disables bottom halves).
3483 *
3484 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003485 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3486 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003487 *
3488 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3489 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
3490 */
3491static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3492 struct sk_buff *skb)
3493{
3494 local_bh_disable();
3495 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
3496 local_bh_enable();
3497}
3498
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003499/**
3500 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
3501 *
3502 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
3503 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
3504 * entering/leaving PS mode.
3505 *
3506 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
3507 *
3508 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
3509 * each other.
3510 *
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003511 * @sta: currently connected sta
3512 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003513 *
3514 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003515 */
3516int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
3517
3518/**
3519 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
3520 * (in process context)
3521 *
3522 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
3523 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
3524 * applies.
3525 *
3526 * @sta: currently connected sta
3527 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003528 *
3529 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003530 */
3531static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3532 bool start)
3533{
3534 int ret;
3535
3536 local_bh_disable();
3537 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
3538 local_bh_enable();
3539
3540 return ret;
3541}
3542
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01003543/*
3544 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
3545 * This is enough for the radiotap header.
3546 */
Helmut Schaa7f2a5e22011-10-11 18:08:55 +02003547#define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM 14
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01003548
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003549/**
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003550 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
Randy Dunlapbdfbe802011-05-22 17:22:45 -07003551 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003552 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
3553 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003554 *
3555 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003556 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
3557 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003558 *
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003559 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
3560 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
3561 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
3562 * call! Beware of the locking!)
3563 *
3564 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
3565 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
3566 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
3567 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
3568 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
3569 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
3570 *
3571 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
3572 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
3573 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
3574 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
3575 * use this API.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003576 */
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003577void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3578 u8 tid, bool buffered);
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003579
3580/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02003581 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
3582 *
3583 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
3584 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
3585 * rate selection table for the station entry.
3586 *
3587 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3588 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
3589 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
3590 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
3591 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
3592 */
3593void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3594 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3595 struct sk_buff *skb,
3596 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
3597 int max_rates);
3598
3599/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003600 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
3601 *
3602 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
3603 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
3604 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
3605 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003606 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
3607 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01003608 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003609 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3610 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003611 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003612 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3613 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003614 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003615void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003616 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003617
3618/**
Felix Fietkauf027c2a2014-11-19 20:08:13 +01003619 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
3620 *
3621 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
3622 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
3623 * specific skbs.
3624 *
3625 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
3626 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
3627 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
3628 *
3629 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3630 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
3631 * (NULL for multicast packets)
3632 * @info: tx status information
3633 */
3634void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3635 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3636 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
3637
3638/**
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01003639 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
3640 *
3641 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
3642 *
3643 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
3644 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
3645 * for a single hardware.
3646 *
3647 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3648 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
3649 */
3650static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3651 struct sk_buff *skb)
3652{
3653 local_bh_disable();
3654 ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
3655 local_bh_enable();
3656}
3657
3658/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07003659 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003660 *
3661 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
3662 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
3663 *
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01003664 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
3665 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003666 *
3667 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3668 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003669 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003670void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003671 struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003672
3673/**
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03003674 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
3675 *
3676 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
3677 * connected STA.
3678 *
3679 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
3680 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
3681 */
3682void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
3683
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03003684#define IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM 2
3685
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03003686/**
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003687 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
3688 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
3689 * @tim_length: size of TIM element
Luciano Coelho8d77ec82014-05-15 20:32:08 +03003690 * @csa_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
3691 * to CSA counters. This array can contain zero values which
3692 * should be ignored.
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003693 */
3694struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
3695 u16 tim_offset;
3696 u16 tim_length;
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03003697
3698 u16 csa_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM];
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003699};
3700
3701/**
3702 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
3703 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3704 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3705 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
3706 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
3707 *
3708 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
3709 * obtain the beacon template.
3710 *
3711 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
3712 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03003713 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
3714 * applicable, the CSA count.
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003715 *
3716 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
3717 *
3718 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
3719 */
3720struct sk_buff *
3721ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3722 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3723 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs);
3724
3725/**
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003726 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
3727 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003728 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003729 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
3730 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
3731 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
3732 * (including the ID and length bytes!).
3733 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
3734 *
3735 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003736 * obtain the beacon frame.
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003737 *
3738 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
3739 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003740 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
3741 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003742 *
3743 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003744 *
3745 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003746 */
3747struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3748 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3749 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
3750
3751/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003752 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
3753 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003754 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003755 *
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003756 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003757 *
3758 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003759 */
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003760static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3761 struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
3762{
3763 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
3764}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003765
3766/**
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03003767 * ieee80211_csa_update_counter - request mac80211 to decrement the csa counter
3768 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3769 *
3770 * The csa counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
3771 * This function is called implicitly when
3772 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
3773 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
3774 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's csa counters.
3775 *
3776 * Return: new csa counter value
3777 */
3778u8 ieee80211_csa_update_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3779
3780/**
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003781 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
3782 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3783 *
3784 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003785 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003786 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
3787 */
3788void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3789
3790/**
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003791 * ieee80211_csa_is_complete - find out if counters reached 1
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003792 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3793 *
3794 * This function returns whether the channel switch counters reached zero.
3795 */
3796bool ieee80211_csa_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3797
3798
3799/**
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02003800 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
3801 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3802 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3803 *
3804 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
3805 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
3806 *
3807 * Can only be called in AP mode.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003808 *
3809 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02003810 */
3811struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3812 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3813
3814/**
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02003815 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
3816 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3817 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3818 *
3819 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
3820 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
3821 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
3822 *
3823 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
3824 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003825 *
3826 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02003827 */
3828struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3829 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3830
3831/**
3832 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
3833 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3834 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3835 *
3836 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
3837 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
3838 * BSSID and address is used.
3839 *
3840 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
3841 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003842 *
3843 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02003844 */
3845struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3846 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3847
3848/**
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02003849 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
3850 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02003851 * @src_addr: source MAC address
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02003852 * @ssid: SSID buffer
3853 * @ssid_len: length of SSID
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01003854 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02003855 *
3856 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
3857 * hardware.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003858 *
3859 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02003860 */
3861struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02003862 const u8 *src_addr,
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02003863 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01003864 size_t tailroom);
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02003865
3866/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003867 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
3868 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003869 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003870 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
3871 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003872 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003873 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
3874 *
3875 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
3876 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
3877 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
3878 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
3879 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003880void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003881 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003882 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003883 struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
3884
3885/**
3886 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
3887 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003888 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003889 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003890 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003891 *
3892 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
3893 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
3894 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003895 *
3896 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003897 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003898__le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3899 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003900 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003901
3902/**
3903 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
3904 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003905 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003906 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
3907 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003908 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003909 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
3910 *
3911 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
3912 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
3913 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
3914 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
3915 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003916void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3917 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003918 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003919 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003920 struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
3921
3922/**
3923 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
3924 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003925 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003926 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003927 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003928 *
3929 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
3930 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
3931 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003932 *
3933 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003934 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003935__le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3936 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003937 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003938 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003939
3940/**
3941 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
3942 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003943 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02003944 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003945 * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01003946 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003947 *
3948 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
3949 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003950 *
3951 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003952 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003953__le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3954 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Michal Kazior4ee73f32012-04-11 08:47:56 +02003955 enum ieee80211_band band,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003956 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01003957 struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003958
3959/**
3960 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
3961 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003962 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003963 *
3964 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
3965 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
3966 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
3967 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003968 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
3969 *
3970 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
3971 * frames are available.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003972 *
3973 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
3974 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
3975 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
3976 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
3977 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
3978 * use common code for all beacons.
3979 */
3980struct sk_buff *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003981ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003982
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003983/**
Johannes Berg42d987952011-07-07 18:58:01 +02003984 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
3985 *
3986 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
3987 *
3988 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3989 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
3990 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
3991 */
3992void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3993 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
3994
3995/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02003996 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd42008-03-20 15:06:41 +02003997 *
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02003998 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
3999 * from the given packet.
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd42008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004000 *
4001 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004002 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
4003 * with this P1K
4004 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd42008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004005 */
Johannes Berg42d987952011-07-07 18:58:01 +02004006static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4007 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
4008{
4009 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
4010 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
4011 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
4012
4013 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
4014}
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004015
4016/**
Johannes Berg8bca5d82011-07-13 19:50:34 +02004017 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
4018 *
4019 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
4020 * and transmitter address.
4021 *
4022 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4023 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
4024 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4025 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4026 */
4027void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4028 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4029
4030/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004031 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
4032 *
4033 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
4034 * in the packet.
4035 *
4036 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4037 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
4038 * encrypted with this key
4039 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
4040 */
4041void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4042 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02004043
4044/**
Assaf Krauss5d0d04e2012-08-01 15:12:48 +03004045 * ieee80211_aes_cmac_calculate_k1_k2 - calculate the AES-CMAC sub keys
4046 *
4047 * This function computes the two AES-CMAC sub-keys, based on the
4048 * previously installed master key.
4049 *
4050 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4051 * @k1: a buffer to be filled with the 1st sub-key
4052 * @k2: a buffer to be filled with the 2nd sub-key
4053 */
4054void ieee80211_aes_cmac_calculate_k1_k2(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4055 u8 *k1, u8 *k2);
4056
4057/**
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004058 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
4059 *
4060 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
4061 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
4062 * reverse order than in packet)
4063 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
4064 * reverse order than in packet)
4065 */
4066struct ieee80211_key_seq {
4067 union {
4068 struct {
4069 u32 iv32;
4070 u16 iv16;
4071 } tkip;
4072 struct {
4073 u8 pn[6];
4074 } ccmp;
4075 struct {
4076 u8 pn[6];
4077 } aes_cmac;
4078 };
4079};
4080
4081/**
4082 * ieee80211_get_key_tx_seq - get key TX sequence counter
4083 *
4084 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4085 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
4086 *
4087 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current TX IV/PN
4088 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV generation is
4089 * offloaded to the device.
4090 *
4091 * Note that this function may only be called when no TX processing
4092 * can be done concurrently, for example when queues are stopped
4093 * and the stop has been synchronized.
4094 */
4095void ieee80211_get_key_tx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4096 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4097
4098/**
4099 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
4100 *
4101 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4102 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP only);
4103 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4104 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4105 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
4106 *
4107 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
4108 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
4109 * by the device and not by mac80211.
4110 *
4111 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4112 * can be done concurrently.
4113 */
4114void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4115 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4116
4117/**
Johannes Berg27b3eb92013-08-07 20:11:55 +02004118 * ieee80211_set_key_tx_seq - set key TX sequence counter
4119 *
4120 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4121 * @seq: new sequence data
4122 *
4123 * This function allows a driver to set the current TX IV/PNs for the
4124 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and the
4125 * device may have transmitted frames using the PTK, e.g. replies to
4126 * ARP requests.
4127 *
4128 * Note that this function may only be called when no TX processing
4129 * can be done concurrently.
4130 */
4131void ieee80211_set_key_tx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4132 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4133
4134/**
4135 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
4136 *
4137 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4138 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP only);
4139 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4140 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4141 * @seq: new sequence data
4142 *
4143 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
4144 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
4145 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
4146 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
4147 *
4148 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4149 * can be done concurrently.
4150 */
4151void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4152 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4153
4154/**
4155 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
4156 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4157 *
4158 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
4159 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
4160 * instead assumed to have been removed already.
4161 *
4162 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
4163 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
4164 */
4165void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4166
4167/**
4168 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
4169 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
4170 * @keyconf: new key data
4171 *
4172 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
4173 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
4174 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
4175 *
4176 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
4177 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
4178 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
4179 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
4180 *
4181 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
4182 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
4183 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
4184 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
4185 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
4186 * of the reconfiguration.
4187 *
4188 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
4189 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
4190 *
4191 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
4192 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
4193 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
4194 * the key that's being replaced.
4195 */
4196struct ieee80211_key_conf *
4197ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4198 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4199
4200/**
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02004201 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
4202 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
4203 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
4204 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
4205 * @gfp: allocation flags
4206 */
4207void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
4208 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
4209
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd42008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004210/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004211 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
4212 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4213 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4214 *
4215 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
4216 */
4217void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4218
4219/**
4220 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
4221 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4222 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4223 *
4224 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4225 */
4226void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4227
4228/**
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03004229 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
4230 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4231 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4232 *
4233 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004234 *
4235 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03004236 */
4237
4238int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4239
4240/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004241 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
4242 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4243 *
4244 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4245 */
4246void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4247
4248/**
4249 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
4250 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4251 *
4252 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
4253 */
4254void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4255
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004256/**
4257 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
4258 *
4259 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
4260 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
Johannes Berg8789d452010-08-26 13:30:26 +02004261 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
4262 * any context, including hardirq context.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004263 *
4264 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
Johannes Berg2a519312009-02-10 21:25:55 +01004265 * @aborted: set to true if scan was aborted
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004266 */
Johannes Berg2a519312009-02-10 21:25:55 +01004267void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool aborted);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004268
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004269/**
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03004270 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
4271 *
4272 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
4273 * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
4274 *
4275 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
4276 */
4277void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4278
4279/**
4280 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
4281 *
4282 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
4283 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
4284 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
4285 * while associating, for instance.
4286 *
4287 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
4288 */
4289void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4290
4291/**
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004292 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
4293 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
4294 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
4295 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
4296 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
4297 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
4298 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
4299 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
4300 */
4301enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
4302 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0,
4303 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0),
4304};
4305
4306/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07004307 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004308 *
4309 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4310 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004311 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
4312 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
4313 * be used.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004314 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004315 *
4316 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004317 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004318 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004319 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4320 */
4321void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004322 u32 iter_flags,
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004323 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004324 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004325 void *data);
4326
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004327/**
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004328 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
4329 *
4330 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4331 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4332 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
4333 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004334 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004335 *
4336 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004337 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004338 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4339 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4340 */
4341void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004342 u32 iter_flags,
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004343 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4344 u8 *mac,
4345 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4346 void *data);
4347
4348/**
Johannes Bergc7c71062013-08-21 22:07:20 +02004349 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces
4350 *
4351 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4352 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4353 * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL.
4354 *
4355 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4356 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
4357 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4358 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4359 */
4360void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4361 u32 iter_flags,
4362 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4363 u8 *mac,
4364 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4365 void *data);
4366
4367/**
Arik Nemtsov0fc1e042014-10-22 12:30:59 +03004368 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
4369 *
4370 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
4371 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
4372 * function for them.
4373 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
4374 *
4375 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4376 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4377 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4378 */
4379void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4380 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4381 struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
4382 void *data);
4383/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04004384 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
4385 *
4386 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
4387 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
4388 *
4389 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
4390 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
4391 */
4392void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
4393
4394/**
4395 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
4396 *
4397 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
4398 * workqueue.
4399 *
4400 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
4401 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
4402 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
4403 */
4404void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4405 struct delayed_work *dwork,
4406 unsigned long delay);
4407
4408/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004409 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004410 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004411 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05304412 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07004413 *
4414 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004415 *
4416 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
4417 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
4418 * will be managed by the mac80211.
4419 */
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05304420int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
4421 u16 timeout);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004422
4423/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004424 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004425 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004426 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
4427 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
4428 *
4429 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02004430 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
4431 * from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004432 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004433void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004434 u16 tid);
4435
4436/**
4437 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004438 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004439 * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07004440 *
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02004441 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004442 *
4443 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
4444 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
4445 * will be managed by the mac80211.
4446 */
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02004447int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004448
4449/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004450 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004451 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004452 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
4453 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
4454 *
4455 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02004456 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
4457 * can be called from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004458 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004459void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004460 u16 tid);
4461
Mohamed Abbas84363e62008-04-04 16:59:58 -07004462/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004463 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
4464 *
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004465 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004466 * @addr: station's address
4467 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004468 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
4469 *
4470 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004471 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
4472 */
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004473struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004474 const u8 *addr);
4475
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004476/**
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004477 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004478 *
4479 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004480 * @addr: remote station's address
4481 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004482 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004483 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
4484 *
4485 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004486 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
4487 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004488 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
4489 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
4490 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
4491 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
4492 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
4493 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
4494 * is not reliable.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004495 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004496 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004497 */
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004498struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4499 const u8 *addr,
4500 const u8 *localaddr);
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004501
4502/**
Johannes Bergaf818582009-11-06 11:35:50 +01004503 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
4504 * @hw: the hardware
4505 * @pubsta: the station
4506 * @block: whether to block or unblock
4507 *
4508 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
4509 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
4510 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
4511 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
4512 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
4513 *
4514 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
4515 * manner.
4516 *
4517 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
4518 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
4519 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
4520 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
4521 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
4522 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
4523 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
4524 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
4525 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
4526 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
4527 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
4528 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
4529 * woke up while blocked or not.
4530 */
4531void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4532 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
4533
4534/**
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004535 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
4536 * @pubsta: the station
4537 *
4538 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
4539 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
4540 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
4541 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
4542 *
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01004543 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
4544 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
4545 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
4546 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
4547 *
4548 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
4549 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
4550 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
4551 * and restore the _irqsafe version!
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004552 */
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01004553void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004554
4555/**
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02004556 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
4557 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4558 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
4559 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
4560 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
4561 *
4562 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
4563 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
4564 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
4565 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
4566 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
4567 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
Johannes Bergf850e002011-07-13 19:50:53 +02004568 *
4569 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
4570 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
4571 * set_key callback.
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02004572 */
4573void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4574 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4575 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4576 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4577 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4578 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
4579 void *data),
4580 void *iter_data);
4581
4582/**
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02004583 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
4584 * @hw: pointre obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4585 * @iter: iterator function
4586 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
4587 *
4588 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
4589 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
4590 * places while calling into the driver.
4591 *
4592 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
4593 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
4594 * removed.
Johannes Berg8a61af62012-12-13 17:42:30 +01004595 *
4596 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
4597 * before the restart are considered already present so will be
4598 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
4599 * or not.
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02004600 */
4601void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
4602 struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4603 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4604 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
4605 void *data),
4606 void *iter_data);
4607
4608/**
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02004609 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
4610 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4611 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4612 *
4613 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4614 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
4615 * information. This function must only be called from within the
4616 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
4617 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004618 * %NULL.
4619 *
4620 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02004621 */
4622struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4623 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4624
4625/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004626 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
4627 *
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004628 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004629 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01004630 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004631 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004632 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
4633 */
4634void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004635
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004636/**
4637 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
4638 *
4639 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4640 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01004641 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004642 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
4643 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
Johannes Berg682bd382013-01-29 13:13:50 +01004644 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
4645 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004646 *
4647 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
4648 * without connection recovery attempts.
4649 */
4650void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4651
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02004652/**
Johannes Berg95acac62011-07-12 12:30:59 +02004653 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
4654 *
4655 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4656 *
4657 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
4658 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
4659 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
4660 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
4661 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
4662 *
4663 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
4664 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
4665 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
4666 * disconnect normally later.
4667 *
4668 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
4669 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
4670 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
4671 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
4672 */
4673void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4674
4675/**
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02004676 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
4677 * rssi threshold triggered
4678 *
4679 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4680 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
4681 * @gfp: context flags
4682 *
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01004683 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02004684 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
4685 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
4686 */
4687void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4688 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
4689 gfp_t gfp);
4690
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02004691/**
Johannes Berg98f03342014-11-26 12:42:02 +01004692 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
4693 *
4694 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4695 * @gfp: context flags
4696 */
4697void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
4698
4699/**
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01004700 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
4701 *
4702 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4703 */
4704void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4705
4706/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02004707 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
4708 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4709 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
4710 *
4711 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
4712 * and wake up the suspended queues.
4713 */
4714void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
4715
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02004716/**
4717 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
4718 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Berg633dd1e2010-08-18 15:01:23 +02004719 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02004720 *
4721 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
4722 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
4723 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
4724 */
4725void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4726 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
4727
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02004728/**
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01004729 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
4730 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4731 */
4732void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4733
4734/**
4735 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
4736 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4737 */
4738void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4739
Shahar Levif41ccd72011-05-22 16:10:21 +03004740/**
4741 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
4742 *
4743 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
4744 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
4745 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
4746 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
4747 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
4748 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
4749 *
4750 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4751 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
4752 * @addr: & to bssid mac address
4753 */
4754void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
4755 const u8 *addr);
4756
Felix Fietkau8c771242011-08-20 15:53:55 +02004757/**
4758 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
4759 *
4760 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
4761 * buffer.
4762 *
4763 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4764 * @ra: the peer's destination address
4765 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
4766 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
4767 */
4768void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
4769
Michal Kazior08cf42e2014-07-16 12:12:15 +02004770/**
4771 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
4772 *
4773 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
4774 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
4775 * reordering.
4776 *
4777 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
4778 * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
4779 *
4780 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
4781 * @addr: station mac address
4782 * @tid: the rx tid
4783 */
4784void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4785 const u8 *addr, u16 tid);
4786
4787/**
4788 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
4789 *
4790 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
4791 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
4792 * reordering.
4793 *
4794 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
4795 * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
4796 *
4797 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
4798 * @addr: station mac address
4799 * @tid: the rx tid
4800 */
4801void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4802 const u8 *addr, u16 tid);
4803
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004804/* Rate control API */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004805
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004806/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004807 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004808 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004809 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
4810 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
4811 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01004812 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
4813 * to be filled in
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004814 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
4815 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
4816 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
4817 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
4818 * RTS threshold
4819 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
4820 * if the selected rate supports it
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01004821 * @max_rate_idx: user-requested maximum (legacy) rate
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02004822 * (deprecated; this will be removed once drivers get updated to use
4823 * rate_idx_mask)
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01004824 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02004825 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01004826 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004827 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004828struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
4829 struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
4830 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
4831 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
4832 struct sk_buff *skb;
4833 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
4834 bool rts, short_preamble;
4835 u8 max_rate_idx;
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02004836 u32 rate_idx_mask;
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02004837 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01004838 bool bss;
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004839};
4840
4841struct rate_control_ops {
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004842 const char *name;
4843 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct dentry *debugfsdir);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004844 void (*free)(void *priv);
4845
4846 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
4847 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02004848 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004849 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
Sujith81cb7622009-02-12 11:38:37 +05304850 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02004851 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg64f68e52012-03-28 10:58:37 +02004852 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
4853 u32 changed);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004854 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4855 void *priv_sta);
4856
Felix Fietkauf6845652014-11-19 20:08:08 +01004857 void (*tx_status_noskb)(void *priv,
4858 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
4859 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
4860 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004861 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
4862 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
4863 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004864 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
4865 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004866
4867 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
4868 struct dentry *dir);
4869 void (*remove_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta);
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02004870
4871 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004872};
4873
4874static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4875 enum ieee80211_band band,
4876 int index)
4877{
4878 return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
4879}
4880
Luis R. Rodriguez4c6d4f52009-07-16 10:05:41 -07004881/**
4882 * rate_control_send_low - helper for drivers for management/no-ack frames
4883 *
4884 * Rate control algorithms that agree to use the lowest rate to
4885 * send management frames and NO_ACK data with the respective hw
4886 * retries should use this in the beginning of their mac80211 get_rate
4887 * callback. If true is returned the rate control can simply return.
4888 * If false is returned we guarantee that sta and sta and priv_sta is
4889 * not null.
4890 *
4891 * Rate control algorithms wishing to do more intelligent selection of
4892 * rate for multicast/broadcast frames may choose to not use this.
4893 *
4894 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination. Note
4895 * that this may be null.
4896 * @priv_sta: private rate control structure. This may be null.
4897 * @txrc: rate control information we sholud populate for mac80211.
4898 */
4899bool rate_control_send_low(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4900 void *priv_sta,
4901 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
4902
4903
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004904static inline s8
4905rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
4906 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
4907{
4908 int i;
4909
4910 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
4911 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
4912 return i;
4913
4914 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01004915 WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004916
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01004917 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004918 return 0;
4919}
4920
Luis R. Rodriguezb770b432009-07-16 10:15:09 -07004921static inline
4922bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
4923 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
4924{
4925 unsigned int i;
4926
4927 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
4928 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
4929 return true;
4930 return false;
4931}
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004932
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02004933/**
4934 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
4935 *
4936 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
4937 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
4938 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
4939 * the most recent rate control module decision.
4940 *
4941 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4942 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
4943 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
4944 */
4945int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4946 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4947 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
4948
Johannes Berg631ad702014-01-20 23:29:34 +01004949int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
4950void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004951
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08004952static inline bool
4953conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
4954{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01004955 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08004956}
4957
4958static inline bool
4959conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
4960{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01004961 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
4962 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08004963}
4964
4965static inline bool
4966conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
4967{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01004968 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
4969 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08004970}
4971
4972static inline bool
4973conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
4974{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01004975 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08004976}
4977
4978static inline bool
4979conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
4980{
Rostislav Lisovy041f6072014-04-02 15:31:55 +02004981 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
4982 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
4983 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08004984}
4985
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02004986static inline enum nl80211_iftype
4987ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
4988{
4989 if (p2p) {
4990 switch (type) {
4991 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
4992 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
4993 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
4994 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
4995 default:
4996 break;
4997 }
4998 }
4999 return type;
5000}
5001
5002static inline enum nl80211_iftype
5003ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
5004{
5005 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
5006}
5007
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07005008void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5009 int rssi_min_thold,
5010 int rssi_max_thold);
5011
5012void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Arik Nemtsov768db342011-09-28 14:12:51 +03005013
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005014/**
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005015 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005016 *
5017 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
5018 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005019 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
5020 *
5021 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
5022 * applicable.
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005023 */
Wey-Yi Guy1dae27f2012-04-13 12:02:57 -07005024int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5025
Johannes Bergcd8f7cb2013-01-22 12:34:29 +01005026/**
5027 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
5028 * @vif: virtual interface
5029 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
5030 * @gfp: allocation flags
5031 *
5032 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
5033 */
5034void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5035 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
5036 gfp_t gfp);
5037
Felix Fietkau06be6b12013-10-14 18:01:00 +02005038/**
5039 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
5040 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5041 * @vif: virtual interface
5042 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
5043 * @band: the band to transmit on
5044 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
5045 *
5046 * Note: must be called under RCU lock
5047 */
5048bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5049 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
5050 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
5051
Felix Fietkaua7022e62013-12-16 21:49:14 +01005052/**
5053 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
5054 *
5055 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
5056 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
5057 *
5058 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
5059 *
5060 * private:
5061 *
5062 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
5063 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
5064 */
5065struct ieee80211_noa_data {
5066 u32 next_tsf;
5067 bool has_next_tsf;
5068
5069 u8 absent;
5070
5071 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
5072 struct {
5073 u32 start;
5074 u32 duration;
5075 u32 interval;
5076 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
5077};
5078
5079/**
5080 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
5081 *
5082 * @attr: P2P NoA IE
5083 * @data: NoA tracking data
5084 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
5085 *
5086 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
5087 */
5088int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
5089 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
5090
5091/**
5092 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
5093 *
5094 * @data: NoA tracking data
5095 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
5096 */
5097void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
5098
Arik Nemtsovc887f0d32014-06-11 17:18:25 +03005099/**
5100 * ieee80211_tdls_oper - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
5101 * @vif: virtual interface
5102 * @peer: the peer's destination address
5103 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
5104 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
5105 * @gfp: allocation flags
5106 *
5107 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
5108 */
5109void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
5110 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
5111 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
Andrei Otcheretianskia7f3a762014-10-22 15:22:49 +03005112
5113/**
Liad Kaufmanb6da9112014-11-19 13:47:38 +02005114 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
5115 *
5116 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
5117 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
5118 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
5119 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
5120 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
5121 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
5122 *
5123 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
5124 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
5125 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
5126 *
5127 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
5128 * @tid: the TID to reserve
5129 *
5130 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
5131 */
5132int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
5133
5134/**
5135 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
5136 *
5137 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
5138 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
5139 * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
5140 *
5141 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
5142 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
5143 * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
5144 *
5145 * @sta: the station
5146 * @tid: the TID to unreserve
5147 */
5148void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
5149
5150/**
Andrei Otcheretianskia7f3a762014-10-22 15:22:49 +03005151 * ieee80211_ie_split - split an IE buffer according to ordering
5152 *
5153 * @ies: the IE buffer
5154 * @ielen: the length of the IE buffer
5155 * @ids: an array with element IDs that are allowed before
5156 * the split
5157 * @n_ids: the size of the element ID array
5158 * @offset: offset where to start splitting in the buffer
5159 *
5160 * This function splits an IE buffer by updating the @offset
5161 * variable to point to the location where the buffer should be
5162 * split.
5163 *
5164 * It assumes that the given IE buffer is well-formed, this
5165 * has to be guaranteed by the caller!
5166 *
5167 * It also assumes that the IEs in the buffer are ordered
5168 * correctly, if not the result of using this function will not
5169 * be ordered correctly either, i.e. it does no reordering.
5170 *
5171 * The function returns the offset where the next part of the
5172 * buffer starts, which may be @ielen if the entire (remainder)
5173 * of the buffer should be used.
5174 */
5175size_t ieee80211_ie_split(const u8 *ies, size_t ielen,
5176 const u8 *ids, int n_ids, size_t offset);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07005177#endif /* MAC80211_H */